blob: 240a54898069d33c3ba819048ba18c9ae7c5c5e1 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau21475e32010-05-23 08:46:08 +02005 version 1.5
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreau21475e32010-05-23 08:46:08 +02007 2010/05/23
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200808force-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100809fullconn X - X X
810grace X X X X
811hash-type X - X X
812http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
813http-request - X X X
814id - X X X
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +0200815ignore-persist - X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100816log X X X X
817maxconn X X X -
818mode X X X X
819monitor fail - X X -
820monitor-net X X X -
821monitor-uri X X X -
822option abortonclose (*) X - X X
823option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
824option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
825option allbackups (*) X - X X
826option checkcache (*) X - X X
827option clitcpka (*) X X X -
828option contstats (*) X X X -
829option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
830option dontlognull (*) X X X -
831option forceclose (*) X X X X
832-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
833option forwardfor X X X X
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +0200834option http-pretend-keepalive (*) X X X X
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100835option http-server-close (*) X X X X
836option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
837option httpchk X - X X
838option httpclose (*) X X X X
839option httplog X X X X
840option http_proxy (*) X X X X
841option independant-streams (*) X X X X
842option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
843option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
844option logasap (*) X X X -
845option mysql-check X - X X
846option nolinger (*) X X X X
847option originalto X X X X
848option persist (*) X - X X
849option redispatch (*) X - X X
850option smtpchk X - X X
851option socket-stats (*) X X X -
852option splice-auto (*) X X X X
853option splice-request (*) X X X X
854option splice-response (*) X X X X
855option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
856option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
857-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
858option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
859option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
860option tcpka X X X X
861option tcplog X X X X
862option transparent (*) X - X X
863persist rdp-cookie X - X X
864rate-limit sessions X X X -
865redirect - X X X
866redisp (deprecated) X - X X
867redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
868reqadd - X X X
869reqallow - X X X
870reqdel - X X X
871reqdeny - X X X
872reqiallow - X X X
873reqidel - X X X
874reqideny - X X X
875reqipass - X X X
876reqirep - X X X
877reqisetbe - X X X
878reqitarpit - X X X
879reqpass - X X X
880reqrep - X X X
881-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
882reqsetbe - X X X
883reqtarpit - X X X
884retries X - X X
885rspadd - X X X
886rspdel - X X X
887rspdeny - X X X
888rspidel - X X X
889rspideny - X X X
890rspirep - X X X
891rsprep - X X X
892server - - X X
893source X - X X
894srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
895stats auth X - X X
896stats enable X - X X
897stats hide-version X - X X
898stats realm X - X X
899stats refresh X - X X
900stats scope X - X X
901stats show-desc X - X X
902stats show-legends X - X X
903stats show-node X - X X
904stats uri X - X X
905-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
906stick match - - X X
907stick on - - X X
908stick store-request - - X X
909stick-table - - X X
910tcp-request content accept - X X -
911tcp-request content reject - X X -
912tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
913timeout check X - X X
914timeout client X X X -
915timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
916timeout connect X - X X
917timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
918timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
919timeout http-request X X X X
920timeout queue X - X X
921timeout server X - X X
922timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
923timeout tarpit X X X X
924transparent (deprecated) X - X X
925use_backend - X X -
926------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
927 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200928
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009304.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
931---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100932
933This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
934
935
936acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
937 Declare or complete an access list.
938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
939 no | yes | yes | yes
940 Example:
941 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
942 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
943 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
944
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200945 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100946
947
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100948appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
949 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100950 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
952 no | no | yes | yes
953 Arguments :
954 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
955 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
956
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100957 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100958 checked in each cookie value.
959
960 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
961 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
962 milliseconds.
963
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200964 request-learn
965 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
966 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
967 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
968 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
969 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
970 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
971
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100972 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
973 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
974 data following this prefix.
975
976 Example :
977 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
978
979 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
980 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
981
982 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
983 2 modes are currently supported :
984 - path-parameters :
985 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
986 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
987 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
988 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
989 - query-string :
990 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
991 query string.
992
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100993 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
994 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
995 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
996 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100997 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
998 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
999 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001000 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
1001 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1002
1003 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1004
1005 Example :
1006 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1007
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001008 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick", "stick-table"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001009 and "ignore-persist"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001010
1011
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001012backlog <conns>
1013 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1014 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1015 yes | yes | yes | no
1016 Arguments :
1017 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1018 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1019 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1020
1021 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1022 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1023 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1024 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1025 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1026 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1027 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1028 backlog parameter.
1029
1030 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1031 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1032 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1033
1034 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1035
1036
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001037balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001038balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001039 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1040 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1041 yes | no | yes | yes
1042 Arguments :
1043 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1044 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1045 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1046 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1047
1048 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1049 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1050 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1051 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001052 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1053 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1054 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1055 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1056 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1057 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1058 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1059 it, so that you don't worry.
1060
1061 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1062 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1063 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1064 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1065 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1066 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1067 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1068 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001069
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001070 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1071 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1072 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1073 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1074 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1075 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1076 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1077 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1078
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001079 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1080 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1081 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1082 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1083 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1084 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1085 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1086 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001087 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001088 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001089 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1090 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1091 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001092
1093 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1094 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1095 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1096 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1097 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1098 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1099 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001100 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1101 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1102 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001103
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001104 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1105 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1106 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1107 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1108 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1109 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1110 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1111 URIs start with a leading "/".
1112
1113 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1114 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1115 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1116 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1117
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001118 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001119 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1120
1121 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1122 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1123 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1124 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1125 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1126 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1127 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1128 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1129 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1130 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1131 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1132 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1133 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1134 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1135 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1136 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1137 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1138 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1139 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1140 be randomly balanced if at all.
1141
1142 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1143 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1144 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1145 server will receive the request.
1146
1147 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1148 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1149 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1150 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1151 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001152 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1153 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1154 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001155
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001156 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1157 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1158 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001159 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001160 algorithm is applied instead.
1161
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001162 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001163 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1164 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1165 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1166
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001167 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1168 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1169 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1170
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001171 rdp-cookie
1172 rdp-cookie(name)
1173 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1174 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1175 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1176 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1177 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1178 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001179 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001180 used instead.
1181
1182 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1183 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1184 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1185 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1186
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001187 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1188 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1189 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1190
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001191 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001192 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1193 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001194
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001195 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001196 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001198 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1199 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1200 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001201
1202 Examples :
1203 balance roundrobin
1204 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001205 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001206 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1207 balance hdr(host)
1208 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001209
1210 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1211 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1212
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001213 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001214 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1215 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1216 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1217 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1218
1219 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1220 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1221 defaults to 16 kB.
1222
1223 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1224 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1225
1226 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1227 Round Robin.
1228
1229 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1230 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1231 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1232 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1233
1234 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1235
1236 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001237 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001238 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1239 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1240 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001241
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001242 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1243 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001244
1245
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001246bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...]
1247bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] interface <interface>
1248bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
1249bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] transparent
1250bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] id <id>
1251bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] name <name>
1252bind [<address>]:<port_range> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001253 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1254 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1255 no | yes | yes | no
1256 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001257 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1258 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1259 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1260 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1261 special address "0.0.0.0".
1262
Willy Tarreauc5011ca2010-03-22 11:53:56 +01001263 <port_range> is either a unique TCP port, or a port range for which the
1264 proxy will accept connections for the IP address specified
1265 above. The port is mandatory. Note that in the case of an
1266 IPv6 address, the port is always the number after the last
1267 colon (':'). A range can either be :
1268 - a numerical port (ex: '80')
1269 - a dash-delimited ports range explicitly stating the lower
1270 and upper bounds (ex: '2000-2100') which are included in
1271 the range.
1272
1273 Particular care must be taken against port ranges, because
1274 every <address:port> couple consumes one socket (= a file
1275 descriptor), so it's easy to consume lots of descriptors
1276 with a simple range, and to run out of sockets. Also, each
1277 <address:port> couple must be used only once among all
1278 instances running on a same system. Please note that binding
1279 to ports lower than 1024 generally require particular
1280 privileges to start the program, which are independant of
1281 the 'uid' parameter.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001282
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001283 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1284 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1285 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1286 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1287 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1288 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1289 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1290 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1291 privileges.
1292
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001293 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1294 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1295 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1296 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1297 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1298 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1299 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1300 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1301
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001302 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1303 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1304 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1305 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001306
1307 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1308
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001309 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1310 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1311 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001312 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001313 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1314 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1315 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1316 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1317 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001318
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001319 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1320 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1321 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1322 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1323 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1324 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1325 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1326 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1327 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1328 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1329 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1330 with front firewalls which would see an established
1331 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1332
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001333 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1334 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1335 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1336 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1337 in a frontend.
1338
1339 Example :
1340 listen http_proxy
1341 bind :80,:443
1342 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1343
1344 See also : "source".
1345
1346
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001347bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1348 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1350 yes | yes | yes | yes
1351 Arguments :
1352 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1353 may be used to override a default value.
1354
1355 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1356 option may be combined with other numbers.
1357
1358 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1359 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1360 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1361 missing from all processes.
1362
1363 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1364 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1365 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1366 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1367
1368 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1369 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1370 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1371 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1372 and 'even' instances.
1373
1374 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1375 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1376 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1377 32.
1378
1379 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1380 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1381
1382 Example :
1383 listen app_ip1
1384 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1385 bind_process odd
1386
1387 listen app_ip2
1388 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1389 bind_process even
1390
1391 listen management
1392 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1393 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1394
1395 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1396
1397
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398block { if | unless } <condition>
1399 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1400 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1401 no | yes | yes | yes
1402
1403 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1404 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001405 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001406 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1407 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1408 "block" statements per instance.
1409
1410 Example:
1411 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1412 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1413 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1414 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1415
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001416 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001417
1418
1419capture cookie <name> len <length>
1420 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1421 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1422 no | yes | yes | no
1423 Arguments :
1424 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1425 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1426 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1427 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1428 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1429
1430 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1431 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1432 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1433 right if it exceeds <length>.
1434
1435 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1436 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1437 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1438 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1439
1440 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1441 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1442 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1443
1444 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1445 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1446 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1447 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001448 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001449 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1450
1451 Example:
1452 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1453
1454 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001455 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001456
1457
1458capture request header <name> len <length>
1459 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1460 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1461 no | yes | yes | no
1462 Arguments :
1463 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001464 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001465 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1466 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1467 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1468
1469 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1470 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1471 it exceeds <length>.
1472
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001473 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001474 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1475 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001476 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1477 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1478 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1479 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001480 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001481 environments to find where the request came from.
1482
1483 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1484 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1485 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1486 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001487
1488 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1489 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1490 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1491 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1492
1493 Example:
1494 capture request header Host len 15
1495 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1496 capture request header Referrer len 15
1497
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001498 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001499 about logging.
1500
1501
1502capture response header <name> len <length>
1503 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1504 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1505 no | yes | yes | no
1506 Arguments :
1507 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001508 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001509 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1510 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1511 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1512
1513 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1514 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1515 it exceeds <length>.
1516
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001517 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001518 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1519 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1520 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001521 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1522 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1523 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1524 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001525
1526 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1527 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1528 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1529 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1530
1531 Example:
1532 capture response header Content-length len 9
1533 capture response header Location len 15
1534
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001535 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001536 about logging.
1537
1538
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001539clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001540 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1542 yes | yes | yes | no
1543 Arguments :
1544 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1545 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1546 as explained at the top of this document.
1547
1548 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1549 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1550 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1551 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1552 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1553 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1554 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1555 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001556 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001557 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1558 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1559
1560 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1561 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1562 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1563 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1564 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1565 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1566
1567 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1568 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1569
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001570 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1571 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001572
1573
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001574contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001575 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1576 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1577 yes | no | yes | yes
1578 Arguments :
1579 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1580 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1581 as explained at the top of this document.
1582
1583 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001584 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001585 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001586 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1587 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1588 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1589 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1590
1591 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1592 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1593 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1594 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1595 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1596 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1597
1598 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1599 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1600 instead.
1601
1602 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1603 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1604
1605
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001606cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001607 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001608 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1609 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1610 yes | no | yes | yes
1611 Arguments :
1612 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1613 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1614 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1615 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1616 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1617 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1618 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1619 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1620 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1621
1622 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1623 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1624 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1625 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1626 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1627 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1628 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1629 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1630 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1631 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1632 "insert" and "prefix".
1633
1634 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1635 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1636 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1637 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1638 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1639 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1640 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1641 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1642 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1643
1644 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1645 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1646 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1647 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1648 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1649 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1650 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1651 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1652 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1653 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1654 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1655
1656 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1657 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1658 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1659 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1660 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1661 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1662 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1663 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1664 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1665 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1666
1667 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1668 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1669 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1670 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1671 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1672 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1673 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1674 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1675 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1676
1677 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1678 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1679 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1680 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1681 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1682 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1683 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1684 persistence cookie in the cache.
1685 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1686
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001687 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001688 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001689 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1690 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1691 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1692 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1693 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1694 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001695
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001696 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1697 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1698 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1699 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001700
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001701 Examples :
1702 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1703 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1704 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1705
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001706 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server"
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001707 and "ignore-persist".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001708
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001709
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001710default-server [param*]
1711 Change default options for a server in a backend
1712 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1713 yes | no | yes | yes
1714 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001715 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1716 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1717 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1718 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001719
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001720 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001721 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1722
1723 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001724
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001725
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001726default_backend <backend>
1727 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1729 yes | yes | yes | no
1730 Arguments :
1731 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1732
1733 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1734 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1735 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1736 will catch all undetermined requests.
1737
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001738 Example :
1739
1740 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1741 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1742 default_backend dynamic
1743
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001744 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1745
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001746
1747disabled
1748 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1749 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1750 yes | yes | yes | yes
1751 Arguments : none
1752
1753 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1754 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1755 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1756 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1757 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1758 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1759 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1760
1761 See also : "enabled"
1762
1763
Willy Tarreau5ce94572010-06-07 14:35:41 +02001764dispatch <address>:<port>
1765 Set a default server address
1766 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1767 no | no | yes | yes
1768 Arguments : none
1769
1770 <address> is the IPv4 address of the default server. Alternatively, a
1771 resolvable hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved
1772 during start-up.
1773
1774 <ports> is a mandatory port specification. All connections will be sent
1775 to this port, and it is not permitted to use port offsets as is
1776 possible with normal servers.
1777
1778 The "disabled" keyword designates a default server for use when no other
1779 server can take the connection. In the past it was used to forward non
1780 persistent connections to an auxiliary load balancer. Due to its simple
1781 syntax, it has also been used for simple TCP relays. It is recommended not to
1782 use it for more clarity, and to use the "server" directive instead.
1783
1784 See also : "server"
1785
1786
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001787enabled
1788 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1789 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1790 yes | yes | yes | yes
1791 Arguments : none
1792
1793 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1794 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1795
1796 See also : "disabled"
1797
1798
1799errorfile <code> <file>
1800 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1801 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1802 yes | yes | yes | yes
1803 Arguments :
1804 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1805 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1806
1807 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001808 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001809 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001810 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1811 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001812
1813 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1814 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1815 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1816
1817 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1818 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1819 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1820 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1821
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001822 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1823 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1824 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1825 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1826 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1827 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1828
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001829 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1830 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1831 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001832 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001833 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1834
1835 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1836
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001837 Example :
1838 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1839 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1840 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1841
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001842
1843errorloc <code> <url>
1844errorloc302 <code> <url>
1845 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1846 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1847 yes | yes | yes | yes
1848 Arguments :
1849 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1850 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1851
1852 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1853 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1854 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1855 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1856 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1857
1858 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1859 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1860 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1861
1862 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1863 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1864 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1865 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1866 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1867 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1868 request.
1869
1870 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1871
1872
1873errorloc303 <code> <url>
1874 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1875 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1876 yes | yes | yes | yes
1877 Arguments :
1878 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1879 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1880
1881 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1882 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1883 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1884 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1885 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1886
1887 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1888 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1889 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1890
1891 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1892 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1893 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1894 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001895 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001896
1897 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1898
1899
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001900force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1901 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1902 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1903 no | yes | yes | yes
1904
1905 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1906 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1907 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1908 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1909 marked down for maintenance operations.
1910
1911 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1912 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1913 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1914 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1915 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1916 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1917 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1918 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1919 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1920
1921 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1922 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1923 is used.
1924
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02001925 See also : "option redispatch", "ignore-persist", "persist",
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02001926 and section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001927
1928
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001929fullconn <conns>
1930 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1931 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1932 yes | no | yes | yes
1933 Arguments :
1934 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1935 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1936
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001937 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001938 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001939 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001940 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1941 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1942 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1943 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1944 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001945 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001946
1947 Example :
1948 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1949 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1950 # connections.
1951 backend dynamic
1952 fullconn 10000
1953 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1954 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1955
1956 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1957
1958
1959grace <time>
1960 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1961 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001962 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001963 Arguments :
1964 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1965 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1966 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1967
1968 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1969 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001970 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001971 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1972
1973 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1974 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1975 simplify it.
1976
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001977
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001978hash-type <method>
1979 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1980 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1981 yes | no | yes | yes
1982 Arguments :
1983 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1984 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1985 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1986 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1987 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1988 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1989 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1990 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1991 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1992
1993 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1994 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1995 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1996 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1997 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1998 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1999 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
2000 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
2001 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
2002 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
2003 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
2004 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
2005 important that all servers have the same IDs.
2006
2007 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
2008
2009 See also : "balance", "server"
2010
2011
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002012http-check disable-on-404
2013 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
2014 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002015 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002016 Arguments : none
2017
2018 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
2019 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
2020 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
2021 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
2022 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
2023 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
2024 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
2025 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
2026 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
2027
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002028 See also : "option httpchk"
2029
2030
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002031http-check send-state
2032 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
2033 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2034 yes | no | yes | yes
2035 Arguments : none
2036
2037 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
2038 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
2039 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
2040 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
2041 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2042
2043 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2044 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2045 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2046 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2047 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2048 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2049 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2050 checked in multiple backends.
2051
2052 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2053 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2054
2055 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2056 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2057 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2058 one fails.
2059
2060 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2061 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2062 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2063
2064 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2065 server's queue.
2066
2067 Example of a header received by the application server :
2068 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2069 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2070
2071 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2072
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002073http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2074 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002075 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2076
2077 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2078 no | yes | yes | yes
2079
2080 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2081 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2082 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2083 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2084 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2085 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2086
2087 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2088 instance.
2089
2090 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002091 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2092 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2093 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002094
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002095 http-request allow if nagios
2096 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2097 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2098 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002099
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002100 Example:
2101 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002102
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002103 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002104
2105 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002106
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002107id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002108 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2109 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2110 no | yes | yes | yes
2111 Arguments : none
2112
2113 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2114 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2115 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002116
2117
Cyril Bonté0d4bf012010-04-25 23:21:46 +02002118ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
2119 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
2120 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2121 no | yes | yes | yes
2122
2123 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
2124 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
2125 and running).
2126
2127 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
2128 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
2129 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
2130 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
2131 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
2132
2133 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
2134 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
2135
2136 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
2137 "unless" condition is met.
2138
2139 See also : "force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
2140
2141
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002142log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002143log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002144 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2145 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2146 yes | yes | yes | yes
2147 Arguments :
2148 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2149 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2150 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2151 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2152 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2153 parameter.
2154
2155 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2156 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2157
2158 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2159 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2160 standard syslog port).
2161
2162 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2163 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2164 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2165 appropriately writeable).
2166
2167 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2168
2169 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2170 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2171 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2172
2173 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2174 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2175 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002176 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2177 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2178 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2179 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2180 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002181
2182 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2183
2184 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2185 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2186 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2187
2188 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002189 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2190 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2191 "info".
2192
2193 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2194 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2195 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2196 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2197
2198 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2199 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002200
2201 Example :
2202 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002203 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2204 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002205
2206
2207maxconn <conns>
2208 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2209 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2210 yes | yes | yes | no
2211 Arguments :
2212 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2213 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2214 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2215 closes.
2216
2217 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2218 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2219 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2220 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2221 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2222 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2223 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2224 properly tuned.
2225
2226 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2227 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2228 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2229
2230 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2231
2232
2233mode { tcp|http|health }
2234 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2235 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2236 yes | yes | yes | yes
2237 Arguments :
2238 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2239 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2240 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2241 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2242
2243 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2244 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2245 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2246 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2247 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2248
2249 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2250 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2251 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2252 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2253 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2254 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2255
2256 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2257 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2258 will be refused.
2259
2260 Example :
2261 defaults http_instances
2262 mode http
2263
2264 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2265
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002266
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002267monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002268 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002269 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2270 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002271 Arguments :
2272 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2273 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002274 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002275 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2276 backend and its backup.
2277
2278 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2279 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2280 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2281 servers in a list of backends.
2282
2283 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2284 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2285 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2286 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2287 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2288 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2289 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002290 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002291
2292 Example:
2293 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002294 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002295 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2296 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2297 monitor-uri /site_alive
2298 monitor fail if site_dead
2299
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002300 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2301
2302
2303monitor-net <source>
2304 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2305 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2306 yes | yes | yes | no
2307 Arguments :
2308 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2309 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2310 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2311 followed by a mask.
2312
2313 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2314 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002315 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002316 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2317
2318 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2319 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2320 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2321 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2322 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2323
2324 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2325 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2326 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2327 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2328 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2329
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002330 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2331 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2332
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002333 Example :
2334 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2335 frontend www
2336 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2337
2338 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2339
2340
2341monitor-uri <uri>
2342 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2343 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2344 yes | yes | yes | no
2345 Arguments :
2346 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2347 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2348
2349 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2350 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2351 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2352 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2353 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2354 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2355 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2356 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2357
2358 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2359 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2360 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2361 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2362 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2363 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2364
2365 Example :
2366 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2367 frontend www
2368 mode http
2369 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2370
2371 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2372
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002373
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002374option abortonclose
2375no option abortonclose
2376 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2377 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2378 yes | no | yes | yes
2379 Arguments : none
2380
2381 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2382 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2383 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2384 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002385 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002386 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2387 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2388 encountered while delivering the response.
2389
2390 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2391 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2392 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2393 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2394 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2395 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002396 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002397 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002398 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002399 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2400 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2401 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2402
2403 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2404 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2405 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2406 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2407 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2408 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2409 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2410 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002411 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002412
2413 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2414 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2415
2416 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2417
2418
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002419option accept-invalid-http-request
2420no option accept-invalid-http-request
2421 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2422 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2423 yes | yes | yes | no
2424 Arguments : none
2425
2426 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2427 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2428 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2429 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2430 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2431 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2432 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2433 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2434 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2435
2436 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2437 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2438 been confirmed.
2439
2440 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2441 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2442 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2443 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2444
2445 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2446 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2447
2448 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2449 stats socket.
2450
2451
2452option accept-invalid-http-response
2453no option accept-invalid-http-response
2454 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2455 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2456 yes | no | yes | yes
2457 Arguments : none
2458
2459 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2460 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2461 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2462 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2463 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2464 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2465 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2466 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2467 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2468
2469 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2470 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2471 been confirmed.
2472
2473 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2474 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2475 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2476 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2477
2478 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2479 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2480
2481 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2482 stats socket.
2483
2484
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002485option allbackups
2486no option allbackups
2487 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2488 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2489 yes | no | yes | yes
2490 Arguments : none
2491
2492 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2493 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2494 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2495 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2496 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2497 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2498 order between the backup servers anymore.
2499
2500 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2501 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2502
2503 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2504 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2505
2506
2507option checkcache
2508no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002509 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002510 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2511 yes | no | yes | yes
2512 Arguments : none
2513
2514 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2515 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002516 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002517 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2518 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2519 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2520
2521 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002522 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002523 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002524 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2525 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002526 to the client are :
2527 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002528 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002529 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002530 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2531 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2532 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2533 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2534 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2535 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2536 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2537 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2538 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2539 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2540 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2541
2542 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002543 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002544 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002545 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002546 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2547
2548 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2549 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002550 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002551 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2552
2553 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2554 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2555
2556
2557option clitcpka
2558no option clitcpka
2559 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2560 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2561 yes | yes | yes | no
2562 Arguments : none
2563
2564 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2565 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2566 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2567 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2568
2569 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2570 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2571 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2572 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2573
2574 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2575 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2576 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2577 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2578 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2579
2580 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2581
2582 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2583 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2584 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2585
2586 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2587 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2588
2589 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2590
2591
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002592option contstats
2593 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2594 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2595 yes | yes | yes | no
2596 Arguments : none
2597
2598 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2599 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2600 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2601 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2602 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2603 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2604 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2605
2606
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002607option dontlog-normal
2608no option dontlog-normal
2609 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2610 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2611 yes | yes | yes | no
2612 Arguments : none
2613
2614 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2615 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2616 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2617 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2618 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2619 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2620 logged.
2621
2622 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2623 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2624 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2625
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002626 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002627 logging.
2628
2629
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002630option dontlognull
2631no option dontlognull
2632 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2633 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2634 yes | yes | yes | no
2635 Arguments : none
2636
2637 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2638 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2639 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2640 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2641 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2642 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2643 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2644
2645 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2646 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2647 would not be logged.
2648
2649 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2650 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2651
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002652 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002653
2654
2655option forceclose
2656no option forceclose
2657 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2658 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002659 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002660 Arguments : none
2661
2662 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2663 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2664 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2665 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2666 global session times in the logs.
2667
2668 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002669 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002670 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2671 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2672 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2673 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002674
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002675 This option may also be combined with "option http-pretend-keepalive", which
2676 will disable sending of the "Connection: close" header, but will still cause
2677 the connection to be closed once the whole response is received.
2678
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002679 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2680 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2681
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002682 See also : "option httpclose" and "option http-pretend-keepalive"
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002683
2684
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002685option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002686 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2687 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2688 yes | yes | yes | yes
2689 Arguments :
2690 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2691 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002692 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002693 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002694
2695 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2696 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2697 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2698 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2699 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2700 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2701 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002702 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2703 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2704 possible that the client has already brought one.
2705
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002706 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002707 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002708 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2709 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002710 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2711 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002712
2713 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2714 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2715 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2716 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2717 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2718 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2719 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2720
2721 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002722 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2723 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2724 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002725
2726 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2727 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2728 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2729 when using this option.
2730
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002731 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002732 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2733 frontend www
2734 mode http
2735 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2736
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002737 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2738 backend www
2739 mode http
2740 option forwardfor header X-Client
2741
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002742 See also : "option httpclose"
2743
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002744
2745option http-pretend-keepalive
2746no option http-pretend-keepalive
2747 Define whether haproxy will announce keepalive to the server or not
2748 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2749 yes | yes | yes | yes
2750 Arguments : none
2751
2752 When running with "option http-server-close" or "option forceclose", haproxy
2753 adds a "Connection: close" header to the request forwarded to the server.
2754 Unfortunately, when some servers see this header, they automatically refrain
2755 from using the chunked encoding for responses of unknown length, while this
2756 is totally unrelated. The immediate effect is that this prevents haproxy from
2757 maintaining the client connection alive. A second effect is that a client or
2758 a cache could receive an incomplete response without being aware of it, and
2759 consider the response complete.
2760
2761 By setting "option http-pretend-keepalive", haproxy will make the server
2762 believe it will keep the connection alive. The server will then not fall back
2763 to the abnormal undesired above. When haproxy gets the whole response, it
2764 will close the connection with the server just as it would do with the
2765 "forceclose" option. That way the client gets a normal response and the
2766 connection is correctly closed on the server side.
2767
2768 It is recommended not to enable this option by default, because most servers
2769 will more efficiently close the connection themselves after the last packet,
2770 and release its buffers slightly earlier. Also, the added packet on the
2771 network could slightly reduce the overall peak performance. However it is
2772 worth noting that when this option is enabled, haproxy will have slightly
2773 less work to do. So if haproxy is the bottleneck on the whole architecture,
2774 enabling this option might save a few CPU cycles.
2775
2776 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2777 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2778 This option has no effect if it is combined with "option httpclose", which
2779 has precedence.
2780
2781 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2782 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2783
2784 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
2785
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002786
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002787option http-server-close
2788no option http-server-close
2789 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2790 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2791 yes | yes | yes | yes
2792 Arguments : none
2793
2794 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2795 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2796 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2797 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2798 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2799 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002800 of RFC2616. Please note that some servers do not always conform to those
2801 requirements when they see "Connection: close" in the request. The effect
2802 will be that keep-alive will never be used. A workaround consists in enabling
2803 "option http-pretend-keepalive".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002804
2805 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2806 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2807 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2808 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002809 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2810 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002811
2812 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2813 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002814 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2815 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2816 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002817
2818 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2819 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2820
Willy Tarreau8a8e1d92010-04-05 16:15:16 +02002821 See also : "option forceclose", "option http-pretend-keepalive" and
2822 "option httpclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002823
2824
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002825option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002826no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002827 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2828 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2829 yes | yes | yes | no
2830 Arguments : none
2831
2832 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2833 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2834 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2835 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2836 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2837 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2838 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2839
2840 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2841 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2842 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2843 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2844 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2845 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2846 request along its whole life.
2847
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002848 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2849 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2850 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2851 front of an existing proxy.
2852
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002853 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2854
2855 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2856 http-server-close".
2857
2858
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002859option httpchk
2860option httpchk <uri>
2861option httpchk <method> <uri>
2862option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2863 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2864 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2865 yes | no | yes | yes
2866 Arguments :
2867 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2868 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2869 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2870 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2871 ones.
2872
2873 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2874 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2875 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2876
2877 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2878 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2879 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2880 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2881 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2882
2883 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2884 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2885 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2886 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2887 the lack of any response.
2888
2889 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2890
2891 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2892 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2893 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2894
2895 Examples :
2896 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2897 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2898 backend https_relay
2899 mode tcp
2900 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2901 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2902
2903 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2904 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2905
2906
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002907option httpclose
2908no option httpclose
2909 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2910 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2911 yes | yes | yes | yes
2912 Arguments : none
2913
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02002914 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yet support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002915 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2916 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2917 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2918 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2919 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2920 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2921 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2922 be removed.
2923
2924 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002925 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2926 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2927 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2928 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2929 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2930 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002931
2932 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2933 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2934 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002935 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2936 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002937
2938 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2939 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2940
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002941 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002942
2943
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002944option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002945 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2946 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2947 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002948 Arguments :
2949 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2950 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2951 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2952 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2953 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002954
2955 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2956 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2957 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2958 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2959 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2960 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2961 ports.
2962
2963 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2964
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002965 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2966 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2967 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2968 by default.
2969
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002970 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002971
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002972
2973option http_proxy
2974no option http_proxy
2975 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2976 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2977 yes | yes | yes | yes
2978 Arguments : none
2979
2980 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2981 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2982 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2983 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2984 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2985
2986 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2987 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2988 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2989 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2990 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2991 be analyzed.
2992
2993 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2994 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2995
2996 Example :
2997 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2998 backend direct_forward
2999 option httpclose
3000 option http_proxy
3001
3002 See also : "option httpclose"
3003
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003004
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02003005option ignore-persist { if | unless } <condition>
3006 Declare a condition to ignore persistence
3007 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3008 no | yes | yes | yes
3009
3010 By default, when cookie persistence is enabled, every requests containing
3011 the cookie are unconditionally persistent (assuming the target server is up
3012 and running).
3013
3014 The "ignore-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
3015 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore persistence.
3016 This is sometimes useful to load balance requests for static files, which
3017 oftenly don't require persistence. This can also be used to fully disable
3018 persistence for a specific User-Agent (for example, some web crawler bots).
3019
3020 Combined with "appsession", it can also help reduce HAProxy memory usage, as
3021 the appsession table won't grow if persistence is ignored.
3022
3023 The persistence is ignored when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
3024 "unless" condition is met.
3025
3026 See also : "option force-persist", "cookie", and section 7 about ACL usage.
3027
3028
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02003029option independant-streams
3030no option independant-streams
3031 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
3032 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3033 yes | yes | yes | yes
3034 Arguments : none
3035
3036 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
3037 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
3038 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
3039 receive data or not.
3040
3041 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
3042 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
3043 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
3044 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
3045 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
3046 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
3047 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
3048 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
3049 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
3050 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
3051 socket buffers.
3052
3053 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
3054 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
3055 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
3056 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
3057 slow lines, so use it with caution.
3058
3059 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
3060
3061
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02003062option log-health-checks
3063no option log-health-checks
3064 Enable or disable logging of health checks
3065 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3066 yes | no | yes | yes
3067 Arguments : none
3068
3069 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
3070 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
3071 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
3072 of additional information is limited.
3073
3074 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
3075 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
3076
3077 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
3078
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003079
3080option log-separate-errors
3081no option log-separate-errors
3082 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
3083 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3084 yes | yes | yes | no
3085 Arguments : none
3086
3087 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
3088 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
3089 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
3090 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
3091 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
3092 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
3093 provides very important information.
3094
3095 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
3096 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
3097 error logs.
3098
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003099 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02003100 logging.
3101
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003102
3103option logasap
3104no option logasap
3105 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
3106 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3107 yes | yes | yes | no
3108 Arguments : none
3109
3110 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
3111 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
3112 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
3113 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
3114 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
3115 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
3116 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003117 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003118 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
3119 bytes are expected to be transferred.
3120
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01003121 Examples :
3122 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
3123 mode http
3124 option httplog
3125 option logasap
3126 log 192.168.2.200 local3
3127
3128 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
3129 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
3130 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
3131 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
3132
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003133 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01003134 logging.
3135
3136
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01003137option mysql-check
3138 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
3139 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3140 yes | no | yes | yes
3141 Arguments : none
3142
3143 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3144 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3145 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3146 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3147 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3148
3149 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3150 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3151 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3152 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3153 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3154 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3155
3156 See also: "option httpchk"
3157
3158
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003159option nolinger
3160no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003161 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003162 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3163 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003164 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003165
3166 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3167 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3168 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3169 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3170 connections.
3171
3172 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3173 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3174 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3175 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3176 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3177 this too.
3178
3179 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3180 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3181 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3182
3183 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3184 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3185 for servers.
3186
3187 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3188 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3189
3190
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003191option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3192 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3193 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3194 yes | yes | yes | yes
3195 Arguments :
3196 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3197 matching <network>
3198 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3199 header name.
3200
3201 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3202 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3203 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3204 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3205 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3206 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3207 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3208 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3209 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3210 possible that the client has already brought one.
3211
3212 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3213 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3214 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3215 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3216 header and requires different one.
3217
3218 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3219 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3220 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3221 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3222 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3223 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3224 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3225
3226 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3227 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3228 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3229 both are defined.
3230
3231 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3232 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3233 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3234 when using this option.
3235
3236 Examples :
3237 # Original Destination address
3238 frontend www
3239 mode http
3240 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3241
3242 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3243 backend www
3244 mode http
3245 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3246
3247 See also : "option httpclose"
3248
3249
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003250option persist
3251no option persist
3252 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3253 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3254 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003255 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003256
3257 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3258 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3259 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3260 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3261 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3262 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3263 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3264 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3265 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3266 redirected to another valid server.
3267
3268 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3269 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3270
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003271 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003272
3273
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003274option redispatch
3275no option redispatch
3276 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3277 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3278 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003279 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003280
3281 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3282 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3283 be able to access the service anymore.
3284
3285 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3286 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3287
3288 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3289 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3290 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003291
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003292 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3293 "redisp" keywords.
3294
3295 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3296 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3297
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003298 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003299
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003300
3301option smtpchk
3302option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3303 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3304 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3305 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003306 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003307 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3308 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3309 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3310
3311 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3312 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3313 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3314
3315 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3316 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3317 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3318 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3319 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3320 dead server.
3321
3322 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3323 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3324 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3325 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3326
3327 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3328 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3329 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3330 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3331 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3332
3333 Example :
3334 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3335
3336 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3337
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003338
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003339option socket-stats
3340no option socket-stats
3341
3342 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3343 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3344 yes | yes | yes | no
3345
3346 Arguments : none
3347
3348
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003349option splice-auto
3350no option splice-auto
3351 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3352 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3353 yes | yes | yes | yes
3354 Arguments : none
3355
3356 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3357 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3358 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3359 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003360 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003361 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3362 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3363 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3364 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3365
3366 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3367 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3368 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3369 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3370 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3371 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3372 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3373 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3374 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3375 keyword.
3376
3377 Example :
3378 option splice-auto
3379
3380 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3381 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3382
3383 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3384 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3385
3386
3387option splice-request
3388no option splice-request
3389 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3390 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3391 yes | yes | yes | yes
3392 Arguments : none
3393
3394 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3395 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3396 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3397 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3398 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3399 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3400
3401 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3402
3403 Example :
3404 option splice-request
3405
3406 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3407 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3408
3409 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3410 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3411
3412
3413option splice-response
3414no option splice-response
3415 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3416 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3417 yes | yes | yes | yes
3418 Arguments : none
3419
3420 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3421 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3422 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3423 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3424 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3425 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3426
3427 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3428
3429 Example :
3430 option splice-response
3431
3432 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3433 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3434
3435 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3436 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3437
3438
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003439option srvtcpka
3440no option srvtcpka
3441 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3442 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3443 yes | no | yes | yes
3444 Arguments : none
3445
3446 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3447 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3448 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3449 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3450
3451 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3452 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3453 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3454 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3455
3456 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3457 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3458 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3459 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3460 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3461
3462 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3463
3464 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3465 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3466 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3467
3468 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3469 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3470
3471 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3472
3473
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003474option ssl-hello-chk
3475 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3476 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3477 yes | no | yes | yes
3478 Arguments : none
3479
3480 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3481 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3482 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3483 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3484 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3485 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3486 hello message.
3487
3488 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3489 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3490 messages, which is appreciable.
3491
3492 See also: "option httpchk"
3493
3494
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003495option tcp-smart-accept
3496no option tcp-smart-accept
3497 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3498 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3499 yes | yes | yes | no
3500 Arguments : none
3501
3502 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3503 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3504 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3505 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3506 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3507 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3508
3509 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3510 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3511 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3512 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3513
3514 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3515 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3516 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3517 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3518
3519 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3520 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3521 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3522
3523 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3524 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3525 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3526
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003527 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3528
3529
3530option tcp-smart-connect
3531no option tcp-smart-connect
3532 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3533 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3534 yes | no | yes | yes
3535 Arguments : none
3536
3537 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3538 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3539 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3540 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3541 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3542
3543 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3544 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3545 complex.
3546
3547 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3548 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3549 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3550
3551 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3552 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3553
3554 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3555
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003556
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003557option tcpka
3558 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3559 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3560 yes | yes | yes | yes
3561 Arguments : none
3562
3563 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3564 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3565 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3566 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3567
3568 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3569 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3570 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3571 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3572
3573 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3574 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3575 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3576 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3577 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3578
3579 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3580
3581 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3582 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3583 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3584 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3585 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3586 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3587 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3588 backends.
3589
3590 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3591
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003592
3593option tcplog
3594 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3595 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3596 yes | yes | yes | yes
3597 Arguments : none
3598
3599 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3600 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3601 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3602 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3603 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3604 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3605 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3606 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3607
3608 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3609
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003610 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003611
3612
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003613option transparent
3614no option transparent
3615 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3616 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003617 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003618 Arguments : none
3619
3620 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3621 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3622 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3623 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3624 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3625 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3626 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3627 appropriate server.
3628
3629 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3630 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3631
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003632 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3633 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003634
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003635
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003636persist rdp-cookie
3637persist rdp-cookie(name)
3638 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3639 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3640 yes | no | yes | yes
3641 Arguments :
3642 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003643 default cookie name "msts" will be used. There currently is no
3644 valid reason to change this name.
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003645
3646 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3647 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3648 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3649 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3650 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3651 forwarded to this server.
3652
3653 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3654 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3655 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003656 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003657 a single "listen" section.
3658
Willy Tarreau61e28f22010-05-16 22:31:05 +02003659 Also, it is important to understand that the terminal server will emit this
3660 RDP cookie only if it is configured for "token redirection mode", which means
3661 that the "IP address redirection" option is disabled.
3662
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003663 Example :
3664 listen tse-farm
3665 bind :3389
3666 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3667 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3668 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3669 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3670 persist rdp-cookie
3671 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3672 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3673 balance rdp-cookie
3674 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3675 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3676
3677 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3678
3679
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003680rate-limit sessions <rate>
3681 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3682 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3683 yes | yes | yes | no
3684 Arguments :
3685 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3686 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3687
3688 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3689 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3690 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3691 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3692 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3693 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3694
3695 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3696 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3697 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3698 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3699
3700 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3701 listen smtp
3702 mode tcp
3703 bind :25
3704 rate-limit sessions 10
3705 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3706
3707 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3708 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3709
3710 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3711
3712
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003713redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3714redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003715 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3716 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3717 no | yes | yes | yes
3718
3719 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003720 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003721
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003722 Arguments :
3723 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3724 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3725 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3726 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003727 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3728 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3729 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3730 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003731
3732 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3733 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3734 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3735 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3736 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3737 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3738 location with a GET method.
3739
3740 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3741 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3742
3743 - "drop-query"
3744 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3745 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3746 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3747 with a location-type redirect.
3748
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003749 - "append-slash"
3750 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3751 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3752 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3753 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3754
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003755 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3756 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3757 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3758 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3759 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3760 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3761 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3762
3763 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3764 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3765 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3766 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3767 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3768 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3769 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003770
3771 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3772 acl clear dst_port 80
3773 acl secure dst_port 8080
3774 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003775 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003776 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003777 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3778
3779 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003780 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3781 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3782 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003783 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003784
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003785 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3786 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3787 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3788
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003789 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003790
3791
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003792redisp (deprecated)
3793redispatch (deprecated)
3794 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3795 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3796 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003797 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003798
3799 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3800 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3801 be able to access the service anymore.
3802
3803 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3804 redistribute them to a working server.
3805
3806 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3807 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3808 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003809
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003810 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3811 "option redispatch" instead.
3812
3813 See also : "option redispatch"
3814
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003815
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003816reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003817 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3818 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3819 no | yes | yes | yes
3820 Arguments :
3821 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3822 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003823 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003824
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003825 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3826 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3827
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003828 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3829 the last header of an HTTP request.
3830
3831 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3832 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3833 responses.
3834
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003835 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3836 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3837 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3838
3839 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3840 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003841
3842
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003843reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3844reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003845 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3846 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3847 no | yes | yes | yes
3848 Arguments :
3849 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3850 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3851 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3852 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3853 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3854 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3855 ignores case.
3856
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003857 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3858 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3859
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003860 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3861 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3862 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3863 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003864 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003865
3866 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3867 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3868
3869 Example :
3870 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3871 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3872 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3873
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003874 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3875 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003876
3877
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003878reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3879reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003880 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3881 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3882 no | yes | yes | yes
3883 Arguments :
3884 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3885 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3886 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3887 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3888 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3889 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3890
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003891 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3892 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3893
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003894 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3895 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3896 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3897 next servers.
3898
3899 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3900 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3901 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3902
3903 Example :
3904 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3905 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3906 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3907
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003908 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3909 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003910
3911
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003912reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3913reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003914 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3915 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3916 no | yes | yes | yes
3917 Arguments :
3918 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3919 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3920 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3921 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3922 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3923 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3924 case.
3925
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003926 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3927 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3928
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003929 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3930 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3931 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3932 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003933 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003934
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003935 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003936 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003937 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003938
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003939 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3940 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3941
3942 Example :
3943 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3944 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3945 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3946
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003947 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3948 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003949
3950
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003951reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3952reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003953 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3954 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3955 no | yes | yes | yes
3956 Arguments :
3957 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3958 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3959 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3960 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3961 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3962 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3963 case.
3964
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003965 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3966 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3967
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003968 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3969 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3970 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3971 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3972
3973 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3974 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3975
3976 Example :
3977 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3978 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3979 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3980 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3981
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003982 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3983 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003984
3985
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003986reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3987reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003988 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3989 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3990 no | yes | yes | yes
3991 Arguments :
3992 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3993 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3994 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3995 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3996 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3997 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3998
3999 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4000 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4001 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4002 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004003 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004004
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004005 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4006 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4007
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004008 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
4009 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
4010 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
4011
4012 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4013 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4014 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4015 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
4016 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
4017
4018 Example :
4019 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
4020 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
4021 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
4022 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
4023
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004024 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
4025 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004026
4027
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004028reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4029reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004030 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
4031 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4032 no | yes | yes | yes
4033 Arguments :
4034 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4035 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
4036 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
4037 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
4038 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
4039 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
4040 ignores case.
4041
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004042 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4043 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4044
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004045 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4046 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004047 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
4048 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
4049 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004050 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
4051 not set.
4052
4053 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
4054 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
4055 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
4056 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
4057 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
4058
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004059 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004060 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
4061 # block all others.
4062 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
4063 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
4064
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01004065 # block bad guys
4066 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
4067 reqitarpit . if badguys
4068
4069 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
4070 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004071
4072
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02004073retries <value>
4074 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
4075 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4076 yes | no | yes | yes
4077 Arguments :
4078 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
4079 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
4080 default value is 3.
4081
4082 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
4083 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
4084 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
4085
4086 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
4087 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
4088
4089 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
4090 server even if a cookie references a different server.
4091
4092 See also : "option redispatch"
4093
4094
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004095rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004096 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
4097 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4098 no | yes | yes | yes
4099 Arguments :
4100 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4101 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004102 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004103
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004104 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4105 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4106
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004107 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
4108 the last header of an HTTP response.
4109
4110 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4111 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4112 responses.
4113
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004114 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
4115 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004116
4117
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004118rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4119rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004120 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
4121 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4122 no | yes | yes | yes
4123 Arguments :
4124 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4125 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4126 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4127 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4128 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4129 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
4130 ignores case.
4131
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004132 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4133 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4134
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004135 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
4136 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
4137 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
4138 client.
4139
4140 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4141 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4142 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
4143
4144 Example :
4145 # remove the Server header from responses
4146 reqidel ^Server:.*
4147
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004148 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4149 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004150
4151
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004152rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4153rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004154 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4155 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4156 no | yes | yes | yes
4157 Arguments :
4158 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4159 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4160 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4161 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4162 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4163 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4164 ignores case.
4165
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004166 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4167 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4168
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004169 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4170 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4171 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4172 case-sensitive.
4173
4174 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004175 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4176 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4177 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004178
4179 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4180 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4181
4182 Example :
4183 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4184 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4185
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004186 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4187 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004188
4189
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004190rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4191rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004192 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4193 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4194 no | yes | yes | yes
4195 Arguments :
4196 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4197 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4198 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4199 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4200 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4201 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4202 ignores case.
4203
4204 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4205 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4206 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4207 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004208 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004209
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004210 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4211 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4212
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004213 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4214 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4215 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4216
4217 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4218 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4219 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4220 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4221 are not case-sensitive.
4222
4223 Example :
4224 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4225 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4226
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004227 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4228 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004229
4230
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004231server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4232 Declare a server in a backend
4233 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4234 no | no | yes | yes
4235 Arguments :
4236 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4237 appear in logs and alerts.
4238
4239 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4240 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4241 start-up.
4242
4243 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4244 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4245 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4246 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4247 adding this value to the client's port.
4248
4249 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4250 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004251 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004252
4253 Examples :
4254 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4255 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4256
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004257 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004258
4259
4260source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004261source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004262source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004263 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4264 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4265 yes | no | yes | yes
4266 Arguments :
4267 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4268 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4269 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4270 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4271
4272 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4273 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004274 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4275 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4276 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004277
4278 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4279 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4280 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4281 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4282 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4283 <addr>.
4284
4285 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4286 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4287 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4288 port.
4289
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004290 <hdr> is the name of a HTTP header in which to fetch the IP to bind to.
4291 This is the name of a comma-separated header list which can
4292 contain multiple IP addresses. By default, the last occurrence is
4293 used. This is designed to work with the X-Forwarded-For header
4294 and to automatically bind to the the client's IP address as seen
4295 by previous proxy, typically Stunnel. In order to use another
4296 occurrence from the last one, please see the <occ> parameter
4297 below. When the header (or occurrence) is not found, no binding
4298 is performed so that the proxy's default IP address is used. Also
4299 keep in mind that the header name is case insensitive, as for any
4300 HTTP header.
4301
4302 <occ> is the occurrence number of a value to be used in a multi-value
4303 header. This is to be used in conjunction with "hdr_ip(<hdr>)",
4304 in order to specificy which occurrence to use for the source IP
4305 address. Positive values indicate a position from the first
4306 occurrence, 1 being the first one. Negative values indicate
4307 positions relative to the last one, -1 being the last one. This
4308 is helpful for situations where an X-Forwarded-For header is set
4309 at the entry point of an infrastructure and must be used several
4310 proxy layers away. When this value is not specified, -1 is
4311 assumed. Passing a zero here disables the feature.
4312
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004313 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4314 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4315 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4316 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4317 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4318 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4319
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004320 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4321 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4322 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4323 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4324
4325 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4326 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4327 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4328 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4329 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4330 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4331
4332 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4333 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4334 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4335 there are two methods :
4336
4337 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4338 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4339 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4340 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4341 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4342 of the client ranges may be used.
4343
4344 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4345 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4346 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4347 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4348 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4349 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4350 same session.
4351
4352 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4353 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4354 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4355 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4356 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4357 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4358
4359 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4360 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4361 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004362 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004363
4364 Examples :
4365 backend private
4366 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4367 source 192.168.1.200
4368
4369 backend transparent_ssl1
4370 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4371 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4372
4373 backend transparent_ssl2
4374 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4375 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4376 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4377
4378 backend transparent_ssl3
4379 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4380 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4381 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4382
4383 backend transparent_smtp
4384 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4385 # with Tproxy version 4.
4386 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4387
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02004388 backend transparent_http
4389 # Connect to the servers using the client's IP as seen by previous
4390 # proxy.
4391 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc hdr_ip(x-forwarded-for,-1)
4392
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004393 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004394 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4395
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004396
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004397srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4398 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4399 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4400 yes | no | yes | yes
4401 Arguments :
4402 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4403 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4404 as explained at the top of this document.
4405
4406 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4407 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4408 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4409 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4410 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4411 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4412 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4413
4414 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4415 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4416 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4417 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4418 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004419 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004420 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004421 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004422
4423 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4424 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4425 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4426 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4427 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4428 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4429
4430 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4431 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4432
4433 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4434
4435
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004436stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4437 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4438 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4439 yes | no | yes | yes
4440 Arguments :
4441 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4442
4443 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4444
4445 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4446 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4447 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4448 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4449 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4450 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4451
4452 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4453 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4454 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4455 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4456
4457 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4458 report using "stats scope".
4459
4460 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4461 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4462 unobvious parameters.
4463
4464 Example :
4465 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4466 backend public_www
4467 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4468 stats enable
4469 stats hide-version
4470 stats scope .
4471 stats uri /admin?stats
4472 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4473 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4474 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4475
4476 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4477 backend private_monitoring
4478 stats enable
4479 stats uri /admin?stats
4480 stats refresh 5s
4481
4482 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4483
4484
4485stats enable
4486 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4487 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4488 yes | no | yes | yes
4489 Arguments : none
4490
4491 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4492 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4493 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4494 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4495 - stats auth : no authentication
4496 - stats scope : no restriction
4497
4498 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4499 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4500 unobvious parameters.
4501
4502 Example :
4503 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4504 backend public_www
4505 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4506 stats enable
4507 stats hide-version
4508 stats scope .
4509 stats uri /admin?stats
4510 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4511 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4512 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4513
4514 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4515 backend private_monitoring
4516 stats enable
4517 stats uri /admin?stats
4518 stats refresh 5s
4519
4520 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4521
4522
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004523stats hide-version
4524 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004525 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4526 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004527 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004528
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004529 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4530 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4531 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4532 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4533 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4534 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004535
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004536 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4537 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4538 unobvious parameters.
4539
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004540 Example :
4541 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4542 backend public_www
4543 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004544 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004545 stats hide-version
4546 stats scope .
4547 stats uri /admin?stats
4548 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4549 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4550 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004551
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004552 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4553 backend private_monitoring
4554 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004555 stats uri /admin?stats
4556 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004557
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004558 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004559
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004560
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004561stats realm <realm>
4562 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4563 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4564 yes | no | yes | yes
4565 Arguments :
4566 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4567 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4568 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4569
4570 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4571 using a backslash ('\').
4572
4573 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4574 only related to authentication.
4575
4576 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4577 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4578 unobvious parameters.
4579
4580 Example :
4581 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4582 backend public_www
4583 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4584 stats enable
4585 stats hide-version
4586 stats scope .
4587 stats uri /admin?stats
4588 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4589 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4590 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4591
4592 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4593 backend private_monitoring
4594 stats enable
4595 stats uri /admin?stats
4596 stats refresh 5s
4597
4598 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4599
4600
4601stats refresh <delay>
4602 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4603 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4604 yes | no | yes | yes
4605 Arguments :
4606 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4607 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4608 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4609 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4610 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4611 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4612
4613 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4614 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4615 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4616 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4617
4618 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4619 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4620 unobvious parameters.
4621
4622 Example :
4623 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4624 backend public_www
4625 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4626 stats enable
4627 stats hide-version
4628 stats scope .
4629 stats uri /admin?stats
4630 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4631 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4632 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4633
4634 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4635 backend private_monitoring
4636 stats enable
4637 stats uri /admin?stats
4638 stats refresh 5s
4639
4640 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4641
4642
4643stats scope { <name> | "." }
4644 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4645 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4646 yes | no | yes | yes
4647 Arguments :
4648 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4649 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4650 section in which the statement appears.
4651
4652 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4653 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4654 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4655 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4656 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4657 exists.
4658
4659 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4660 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4661 unobvious parameters.
4662
4663 Example :
4664 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4665 backend public_www
4666 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4667 stats enable
4668 stats hide-version
4669 stats scope .
4670 stats uri /admin?stats
4671 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4672 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4673 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4674
4675 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4676 backend private_monitoring
4677 stats enable
4678 stats uri /admin?stats
4679 stats refresh 5s
4680
4681 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4682
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004683
4684stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4685 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4686 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4687 yes | no | yes | yes
4688
4689 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4690 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4691
4692 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4693 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4694
4695 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4696 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4697 unobvious parameters.
4698
4699 Example :
4700 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4701 backend private_monitoring
4702 stats enable
4703 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4704 stats uri /admin?stats
4705 stats refresh 5s
4706
4707 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4708 global section.
4709
4710
4711stats show-legends
4712 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4713 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4714 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4715 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4716 - IP (socket, server)
4717 - cookie (backend, server)
4718
4719 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4720 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4721 unobvious parameters.
4722
4723 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4724
4725
4726stats show-node [ <name> ]
4727 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4729 yes | no | yes | yes
4730 Arguments:
4731 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4732 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4733
4734 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4735 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4736 provided for each customer.
4737
4738 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4739 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4740 unobvious parameters.
4741
4742 Example:
4743 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4744 backend private_monitoring
4745 stats enable
4746 stats show-node Europe-1
4747 stats uri /admin?stats
4748 stats refresh 5s
4749
4750 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4751 section.
4752
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004753
4754stats uri <prefix>
4755 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4756 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4757 yes | no | yes | yes
4758 Arguments :
4759 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4760 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4761 query string.
4762
4763 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4764 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4765 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4766 possible to reach it in the application.
4767
4768 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004769 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004770 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4771 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4772 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4773 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4774
4775 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4776 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4777 an address or a port to statistics only.
4778
4779 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4780 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4781 unobvious parameters.
4782
4783 Example :
4784 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4785 backend public_www
4786 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4787 stats enable
4788 stats hide-version
4789 stats scope .
4790 stats uri /admin?stats
4791 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4792 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4793 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4794
4795 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4796 backend private_monitoring
4797 stats enable
4798 stats uri /admin?stats
4799 stats refresh 5s
4800
4801 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4802
4803
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004804stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4805 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004806 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004807 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004808
4809 Arguments :
4810 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4811 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4812 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4813 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4814
4815 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4816 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4817 the "stick-table" statement.
4818
4819 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4820 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4821 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4822 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4823 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4824
4825 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4826 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4827 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4828 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4829 transformation rules.
4830
4831 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4832 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4833 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4834 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4835 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4836 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4837 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4838
4839 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4840 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4841 ACL based conditions.
4842
4843 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4844 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4845 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4846 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4847
4848 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4849 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4850 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4851 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4852
4853 Example :
4854 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4855 # last 30 minutes
4856 backend pop
4857 mode tcp
4858 balance roundrobin
4859 stick store-request src
4860 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4861 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4862 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4863
4864 backend smtp
4865 mode tcp
4866 balance roundrobin
4867 stick match src table pop
4868 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4869 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4870
4871 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4872 extraction.
4873
4874
4875stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4876 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4877 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4878 no | no | yes | yes
4879
4880 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4881 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4882 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4883 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4884
4885 Examples :
4886 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004887 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004888
4889 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4890 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4891 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4892
4893
4894 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4895 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4896 backend http
4897 mode http
4898 balance roundrobin
4899 stick on src table https
4900 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4901 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4902 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4903
4904 backend https
4905 mode tcp
4906 balance roundrobin
4907 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4908 stick on src
4909 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4910 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4911
4912 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4913
4914
4915stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4916 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4917 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4918 no | no | yes | yes
4919
4920 Arguments :
4921 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4922 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4923 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4924 server is selected.
4925
4926 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4927 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4928 the "stick-table" statement.
4929
4930 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4931 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4932 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4933 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4934 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4935 address.
4936
4937 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4938 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4939 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4940 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4941 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4942 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4943 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4944 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4945 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4946 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4947
4948 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4949 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4950 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4951 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4952 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4953 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4954 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4955
4956 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4957 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4958 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4959 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4960
4961 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4962 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4963 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4964 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4965 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4966 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4967 another protocol or access method.
4968
4969 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4970 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4971 the request.
4972
4973 Example :
4974 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4975 # last 30 minutes
4976 backend pop
4977 mode tcp
4978 balance roundrobin
4979 stick store-request src
4980 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4981 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4982 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4983
4984 backend smtp
4985 mode tcp
4986 balance roundrobin
4987 stick match src table pop
4988 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4989 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4990
4991 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4992 extraction.
4993
4994
4995stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4996 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4997 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4998 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4999 no | no | yes | yes
5000
5001 Arguments :
5002 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
5003 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
5004 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
5005 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
5006
5007 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
5008 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
5009 instance.
5010
5011 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
5012 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
5013 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
5014 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
5015 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
5016 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
5017 to 31 characters.
5018
5019 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
5020 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
5021 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
5022 increase.
5023
5024 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005025 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
5026 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
5027 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01005028
5029 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
5030 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
5031 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
5032 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
5033 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
5034 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
5035 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
5036 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
5037 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
5038 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
5039 parameter (see below).
5040
5041 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
5042 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
5043 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
5044 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
5045 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
5046 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
5047 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
5048 if not expiration delay is specified.
5049
5050 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
5051 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
5052 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
5053 reference it.
5054
5055 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
5056 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
5057 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
5058 as an exclusive stickiness.
5059
5060 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
5061 about time format.
5062
5063
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005064tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
5065 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5066 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5067 no | yes | yes | no
5068
5069 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
5070 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5071 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5072 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5073 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5074 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5075 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5076 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5077
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005078 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005079 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5080
5081 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
5082 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
5083 "reject" statement.
5084
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005085 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005086
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005087 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005088
5089
5090tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
5091 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
5092 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5093 no | yes | yes | no
5094
5095 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
5096 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
5097 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
5098 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
5099 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
5100 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
5101 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
5102 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
5103
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005104 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005105 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
5106
5107 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
5108 "accept".
5109
5110 Example:
5111 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
5112 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5113 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5114 tcp-request reject if content_present
5115
5116 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
5117 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
5118 acl content_present req_len gt 0
5119 tcp-request accept if content_present
5120 tcp-request reject
5121
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005122 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005123
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005124 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005125
5126
5127tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
5128 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
5129 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5130 no | yes | yes | no
5131 Arguments :
5132 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5133 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5134 as explained at the top of this document.
5135
5136 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
5137 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
5138 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
5139 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
5140 data for at most the specified amount of time.
5141
5142 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
5143 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005144 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005145 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01005146 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
5147 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
5148 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
5149 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005150
5151 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
5152 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
5153 it pass through unaffected.
5154
5155 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
5156 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
5157 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005158 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005159 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
5160 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
5161 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
5162
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005163 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005164 "timeout client".
5165
5166
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005167timeout check <timeout>
5168 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
5169 established.
5170
5171 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5172 yes | no | yes | yes
5173 Arguments:
5174 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5175 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5176 as explained at the top of this document.
5177
5178 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5179 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5180 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5181 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005182 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5183 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5184 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005185
5186 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5187 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5188
5189 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5190 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005191 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005192
5193 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5194 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5195 forget about it.
5196
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005197 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5198 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005199
5200
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005201timeout client <timeout>
5202timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5203 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5204 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5205 yes | yes | yes | no
5206 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005207 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005208 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5209 as explained at the top of this document.
5210
5211 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5212 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5213 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5214 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5215 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5216 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5217 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5218 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005219 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005220 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5221 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5222
5223 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5224 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5225 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5226 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5227 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5228 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5229
5230 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5231 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5232 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5233
5234 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5235
5236
5237timeout connect <timeout>
5238timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5239 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5240 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5241 yes | no | yes | yes
5242 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005243 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005244 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5245 as explained at the top of this document.
5246
5247 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005248 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005249 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005250 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005251 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5252 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005253
5254 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5255 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5256 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5257 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5258 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5259 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5260
5261 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5262 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5263 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5264
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005265 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5266 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005267
5268
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005269timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5270 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5271 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5272 yes | yes | yes | yes
5273 Arguments :
5274 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5275 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5276 as explained at the top of this document.
5277
5278 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5279 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5280 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5281 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5282 once the request has started to present itself.
5283
5284 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5285 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5286 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5287 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5288 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5289
5290 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5291 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5292 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5293 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5294
5295 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5296 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5297 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5298 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5299 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02005300 with tens to hundreds of thousands of clients.
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005301
5302 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5303 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5304 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5305 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5306
5307 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5308
5309
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005310timeout http-request <timeout>
5311 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5312 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005313 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005314 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005315 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005316 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5317 as explained at the top of this document.
5318
5319 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5320 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5321 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5322 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5323 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5324 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5325 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5326 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5327
5328 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5329 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005330 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5331 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005332
5333 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5334 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5335 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5336 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5337 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5338
5339 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005340 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5341 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5342 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005343
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005344 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005345
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005346
5347timeout queue <timeout>
5348 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5350 yes | no | yes | yes
5351 Arguments :
5352 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5353 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5354 as explained at the top of this document.
5355
5356 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5357 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5358 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5359 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5360 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5361
5362 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5363 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5364 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5365 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5366
5367 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5368
5369
5370timeout server <timeout>
5371timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5372 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5373 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5374 yes | no | yes | yes
5375 Arguments :
5376 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5377 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5378 as explained at the top of this document.
5379
5380 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5381 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5382 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5383 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5384 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5385 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5386 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5387
5388 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5389 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5390 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5391 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5392 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005393 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005394 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005395 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005396
5397 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5398 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5399 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5400 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5401 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5402 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5403
5404 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5405 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5406 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5407
5408 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5409
5410
5411timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005412 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005413 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5414 yes | yes | yes | yes
5415 Arguments :
5416 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5417 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5418 as explained at the top of this document.
5419
5420 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5421 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5422 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5423
5424 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5425 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5426 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5427 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005428 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005429
5430 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5431
5432
5433transparent (deprecated)
5434 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5435 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005436 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005437 Arguments : none
5438
5439 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5440 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5441 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5442 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5443 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5444 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5445 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5446 appropriate server.
5447
5448 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5449
5450 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5451 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5452
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005453 See also: "option transparent"
5454
5455
5456use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5457use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005458 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005459 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5460 no | yes | yes | no
5461 Arguments :
5462 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5463
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005464 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005465
5466 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5467 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5468 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005469 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5470 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5471 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5472 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005473
5474 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5475 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5476 assign the backend.
5477
5478 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5479 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5480 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5481 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5482 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5483 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5484
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005485 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005486 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005487 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5488 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5489 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5490
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005491 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005492
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005493
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010054945. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005495------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005496
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005497The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5498which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5499arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5500settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5501after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5502Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5503address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005504
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005505 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005506 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005507
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005508The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005509
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005510addr <ipv4>
5511 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5512 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5513 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5514 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5515 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005516
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005517 Supported in default-server: No
5518
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005519backup
5520 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5521 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5522 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5523 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5524 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5525 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005526
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005527 Supported in default-server: No
5528
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005529check
5530 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5531 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5532 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5533 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5534 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5535 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5536 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5537 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5538 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005539 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5540 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005541
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005542 Supported in default-server: No
5543
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005544cookie <value>
5545 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5546 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5547 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5548 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5549 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5550 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5551 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5552
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005553 Supported in default-server: No
5554
Willy Tarreau96839092010-03-29 10:02:24 +02005555disabled
5556 The "disabled" keyword starts the server in the "disabled" state. That means
5557 that it is marked down in maintenance mode, and no connection other than the
5558 ones allowed by persist mode will reach it. It is very well suited to setup
5559 new servers, because normal traffic will never reach them, while it is still
5560 possible to test the service by making use of the force-persist mechanism.
5561
5562 Supported in default-server: No
5563
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005564error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005565 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5566 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5567 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005568
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005569 Supported in default-server: Yes
5570
5571 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005572
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005573fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005574 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5575 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5576 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5577
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005578 Supported in default-server: Yes
5579
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005580id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005581 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5582 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5583 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005584
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005585 Supported in default-server: No
5586
5587inter <delay>
5588fastinter <delay>
5589downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005590 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5591 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5592 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5593 between checks depending on the server state :
5594
5595 Server state | Interval used
5596 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5597 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5598 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5599 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5600 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5601 or yet unchecked. |
5602 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5603 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5604 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005605
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005606 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5607 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5608 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5609 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5610 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5611 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5612 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5613 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5614 servers.
5615
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005616 Supported in default-server: Yes
5617
5618maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005619 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5620 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5621 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5622 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5623 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5624 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5625 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5626 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5627
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005628 Supported in default-server: Yes
5629
5630maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005631 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5632 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5633 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5634 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5635 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5636 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5637 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5638
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005639 Supported in default-server: Yes
5640
5641minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005642 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5643 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5644 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5645 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5646 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5647 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005648 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005649 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005650
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005651 Supported in default-server: Yes
5652
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005653observe <mode>
5654 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5655 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5656 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5657 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5658 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5659 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5660 headers, a timeout, etc.
5661
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005662 Supported in default-server: No
5663
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005664 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5665
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005666on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005667 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5668 Currently, four modes are available:
5669 - fastinter: force fastinter
5670 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5671 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5672 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5673 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5674
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005675 Supported in default-server: Yes
5676
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005677 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5678
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005679port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005680 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5681 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5682 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5683 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5684 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5685 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5686
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005687 Supported in default-server: Yes
5688
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005689redir <prefix>
5690 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5691 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5692 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5693 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5694 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5695 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5696 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5697 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005698 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005699 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5700 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5701 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5702 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5703 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5704
5705 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5706
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005707 Supported in default-server: No
5708
5709rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005710 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5711 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5712 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5713
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005714 Supported in default-server: Yes
5715
5716slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005717 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5718 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5719 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5720 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5721 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5722 parameters :
5723
5724 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5725 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5726
5727 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5728 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5729 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5730 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5731
5732 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5733 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5734 seen as failed.
5735
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005736 Supported in default-server: Yes
5737
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005738source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaubce70882009-09-07 11:51:47 +02005739source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | hdr_ip(<hdr>[,<occ>]) } ]
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005740source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005741 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5742 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5743 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5744 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5745
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005746 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5747 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5748 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5749 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5750 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5751 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5752 server.
5753
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005754 Supported in default-server: No
5755
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005756track [<proxy>/]<server>
5757 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5758 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5759 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5760 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5761 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5762
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005763 Supported in default-server: No
5764
5765weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005766 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5767 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5768 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005769 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5770 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5771 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5772 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5773 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5774 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005775
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005776 Supported in default-server: Yes
5777
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005778
57796. HTTP header manipulation
5780---------------------------
5781
5782In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5783response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5784request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5785which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5786against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5787to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5788passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5789headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5790never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5791
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005792There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5793(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5794rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5795messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5796in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005797happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005798add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5799normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5800
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005801This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5802in section 4.2 :
5803
5804 - reqadd <string>
5805 - reqallow <search>
5806 - reqiallow <search>
5807 - reqdel <search>
5808 - reqidel <search>
5809 - reqdeny <search>
5810 - reqideny <search>
5811 - reqpass <search>
5812 - reqipass <search>
5813 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5814 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5815 - reqtarpit <search>
5816 - reqitarpit <search>
5817 - rspadd <string>
5818 - rspdel <search>
5819 - rspidel <search>
5820 - rspdeny <search>
5821 - rspideny <search>
5822 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5823 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5824
5825With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5826is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5827parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5828prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5829Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5830
5831 \t for a tab
5832 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5833 \n for a new line (LF)
5834 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5835 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5836 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5837 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5838 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5839
5840The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5841portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5842above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5843regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
58449 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5845is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5846
5847The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5848after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5849
5850Notes related to these keywords :
5851---------------------------------
5852 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5853 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5854 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5855
5856 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5857 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5858 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5859
5860 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5861 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5862 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5863 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5864 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5865
5866 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5867 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5868 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5869 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5870 useless headers before adding new ones.
5871
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005872 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005873 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5874
5875 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5876 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5877 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5878
5879 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5880 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005881 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005882
5883
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010058847. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5885------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005886
5887The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5888content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5889from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5890simple :
5891
5892 - define test criteria with sets of values
5893 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5894
5895The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5896
5897In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5898
5899 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5900
5901This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5902Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5903and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5904an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5905of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5906
5907ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5908'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5909which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5910
5911There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5912performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5913
5914The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5915
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005916 -i : ignore case during matching of all subsequent patterns.
5917 -f : load patterns from a file.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005918 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5919
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005920The "-f" flag is special as it loads all of the lines it finds in the file
5921specified in argument and loads all of them before continuing. It is even
5922possible to pass multiple "-f" arguments if the patterns are to be loaded from
Willy Tarreau58215a02010-05-13 22:07:43 +02005923multiple files. Empty lines as well as lines beginning with a sharp ('#') will
5924be ignored. All leading spaces and tabs will be stripped. If it is absolutely
5925needed to insert a valid pattern beginning with a sharp, just prefix it with a
5926space so that it is not taken for a comment. Depending on the data type and
5927match method, haproxy may load the lines into a binary tree, allowing very fast
5928lookups. This is true for IPv4 and exact string matching. In this case,
5929duplicates will automatically be removed. Also, note that the "-i" flag applies
5930to subsequent entries and not to entries loaded from files preceeding it. For
5931instance :
Willy Tarreau2b5285d2010-05-09 23:45:24 +02005932
5933 acl valid-ua hdr(user-agent) -f exact-ua.lst -i -f generic-ua.lst test
5934
5935In this example, each line of "exact-ua.lst" will be exactly matched against
5936the "user-agent" header of the request. Then each line of "generic-ua" will be
5937case-insensitively matched. Then the word "test" will be insensitively matched
5938too.
5939
5940Note that right now it is difficult for the ACL parsers to report errors, so if
5941a file is unreadable or unparsable, the most you'll get is a parse error in the
5942ACL. Thus, file-based ACLs should only be produced by reliable processes.
5943
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005944Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005945
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005946 - integers or integer ranges
5947 - strings
5948 - regular expressions
5949 - IP addresses and networks
5950
5951
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059527.1. Matching integers
5953----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005954
5955Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5956that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5957expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5958may be omitted.
5959
5960For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5961unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5962representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5963
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005964As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5965two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5966instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5967ranges and operators.
5968
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005969For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005970operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5971Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5972of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005973
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005974Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005975
5976 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5977 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5978 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5979 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5980 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5981
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005982For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005983
5984 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5985
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005986This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5987
5988 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5989
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005990
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059917.2. Matching strings
5992---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005993
5994String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5995exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5996characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5997string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5998to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005999before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006000
6001
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060027.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
6003-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006004
6005Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
6006they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
6007possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
6008passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
6009the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006010the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
6011match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006012
6013
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060147.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
6015----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006016
6017IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
6018netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
6019within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01006020host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006021difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
6022at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
6023does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
6024parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006025
6026
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060277.5. Available matching criteria
6028--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006029
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060307.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
6031------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006032
6033A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
6034analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
6035addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
6036
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006037always_false
6038 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6039 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6040
6041always_true
6042 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
6043 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
6044
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006045avg_queue <integer>
6046avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
6047 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
6048 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
6049 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
6050 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
6051 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
6052 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
6053 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
6054 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
6055 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
6056 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
6057 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01006058
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006059be_conn <integer>
6060be_conn(frontend) <integer>
6061 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
6062 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
6063 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6064 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
6065 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006066
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006067be_sess_rate <integer>
6068be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
6069 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
6070 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
6071 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
6072 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
6073 sucking of an online dictionary).
6074
6075 Example :
6076 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
6077 backend dynamic
6078 mode http
6079 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
6080 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006081
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006082connslots <integer>
6083connslots(backend) <integer>
6084 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006085 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006086 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
6087
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006088 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
6089 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006090
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006091 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006092 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
6093 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
6094 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
6095 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
6096 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006097 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006098
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006099 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
6100 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
6101 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
6102 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08006103
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006104dst <ip_address>
6105 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
6106 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006107
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006108dst_conn <integer>
6109 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
6110 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
6111 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
6112 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
6113 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
6114 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
6115
6116dst_port <integer>
6117 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
6118 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
6119
6120fe_conn <integer>
6121fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
6122 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
6123 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
6124 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
6125 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
6126 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
6127 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
6128 criteria.
6129
6130fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01006131 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006132 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02006133
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006134fe_sess_rate <integer>
6135fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
6136 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
6137 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
6138 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
6139 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
6140 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
6141 the rate to go down below the limit.
6142
6143 Example :
6144 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
6145 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
6146 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
6147 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
6148 frontend mail
6149 bind :25
6150 mode tcp
6151 maxconn 100
6152 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
6153 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
6154 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
6155 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006156
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006157nbsrv <integer>
6158nbsrv(backend) <integer>
6159 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
6160 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
6161 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
6162 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
6163 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006164
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006165queue <integer>
6166queue(frontend) <integer>
6167 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
6168 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
6169 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
6170 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
6171 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
6172 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
6173 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
6174
6175so_id <integer>
6176 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
6177
6178src <ip_address>
6179 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
6180 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
6181 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
6182
6183src_port <integer>
6184 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01006185
Willy Tarreau0b1cd942010-05-16 22:18:27 +02006186srv_is_up(<server>)
6187srv_is_up(<backend>/<server>)
6188 Returns true when the designated server is UP, and false when it is either
6189 DOWN or in maintenance mode. If <backend> is omitted, then the server is
6190 looked up in the current backend. The function takes no arguments since it
6191 is used as a boolean. It is mainly used to take action based on an external
6192 status reported via a health check (eg: a geographical site's availability).
6193 Another possible use which is more of a hack consists in using dummy servers
6194 as boolean variables that can be enabled or disabled from the CLI, so that
6195 rules depending on those ACLs can be tweaked in realtime.
6196
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006197
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061987.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
6199-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006200
6201A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
6202during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
6203through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
6204for more detailed information on the subject.
6205
6206req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006207 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006208 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
6209 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
6210 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
6211 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
6212 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
6213 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
6214
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006215req_proto_http
6216 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
6217 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006218 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006219 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
6220 using TCP request content inspection rules.
6221
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006222req_rdp_cookie <string>
6223req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6224 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6225 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6226 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6227 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6228 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6229 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6230 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6231 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6232
6233req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6234req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6235 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6236 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6237 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6238 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6239 cookies.
6240
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006241req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6242 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6243 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6244 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6245 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6246 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6247 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6248 with TCP request content inspection.
6249
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006250wait_end
6251 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6252 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6253 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6254 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6255 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6256 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6257 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6258 inspection.
6259
6260 Examples :
6261 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6262 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6263 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6264
6265 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6266 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6267 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6268 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6269 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6270 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6271 tcp-request content reject
6272
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006273
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062747.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6275--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006276
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006277A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006278application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6279read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6280than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6281
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006282hdr <string>
6283hdr(header) <string>
6284 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6285 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6286 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6287 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6288 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6289
6290 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6291 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6292 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6293
6294 hdr(Connection) -i close
6295
6296hdr_beg <string>
6297hdr_beg(header) <string>
6298 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6299 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6300 response headers sent by the server.
6301
6302hdr_cnt <integer>
6303hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6304 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6305 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6306 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6307 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6308 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6309 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6310 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6311
6312hdr_dir <string>
6313hdr_dir(header) <string>
6314 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6315 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6316 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6317 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6318 headers sent by the server.
6319
6320hdr_dom <string>
6321hdr_dom(header) <string>
6322 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6323 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6324 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6325 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6326 server.
6327
6328hdr_end <string>
6329hdr_end(header) <string>
6330 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6331 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6332 response headers sent by the server.
6333
6334hdr_ip <ip_address>
6335hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6336 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6337 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6338 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6339 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6340
6341hdr_reg <regex>
6342hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6343 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6344 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6345 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6346 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6347 response headers sent by the server.
6348
6349hdr_sub <string>
6350hdr_sub(header) <string>
6351 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6352 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6353 response headers sent by the server.
6354
6355hdr_val <integer>
6356hdr_val(header) <integer>
6357 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6358 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6359 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6360 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6361
6362http_auth(userlist)
6363http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6364 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6365 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6366 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6367 of specified groups.
6368
6369 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6370
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006371method <string>
6372 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6373 already check for most common methods.
6374
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006375path <string>
6376 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6377 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6378 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6379
6380path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006381 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6382 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006383
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006384path_dir <string>
6385 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6386 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6387 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6388 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6389
6390path_dom <string>
6391 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6392 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6393 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6394
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006395path_end <string>
6396 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6397 control file name extension.
6398
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006399path_reg <regex>
6400 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6401 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6402 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6403
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006404path_sub <string>
6405 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6406 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6407 "path_dir".
6408
6409req_ver <string>
6410 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6411 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6412
6413status <integer>
6414 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6415 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6416 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6417
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006418url <string>
6419 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6420 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6421
6422url_beg <string>
6423 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6424 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6425
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006426url_dir <string>
6427 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6428 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6429 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6430 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6431
6432url_dom <string>
6433 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6434 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6435 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6436
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006437url_end <string>
6438 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6439 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006440
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006441url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006442 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6443 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006444 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006445
6446url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006447 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6448 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006449 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006450 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006451
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006452url_reg <regex>
6453 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6454 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6455 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006456
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006457url_sub <string>
6458 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6459 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006460
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006461
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064627.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6463---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006464
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006465Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6466every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
Patrick Mézard2382ad62010-05-09 10:43:32 +02006467order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006468
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006469ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6470---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006471FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006472HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006473HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6474HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006475HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6476HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6477HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6478HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6479LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006480METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6481METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6482METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6483METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6484METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6485METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006486RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006487REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006488TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006489WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6490---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006491
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006492
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064937.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6494----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006495
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006496Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6497combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006498
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006499 - AND (implicit)
6500 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6501 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006502
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006503A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006504
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006505 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006506
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006507Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6508indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006509
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006510For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6511"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6512requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6513is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006514
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006515 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6516 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6517 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6518 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006519
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006520To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6521and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006522
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006523 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6524 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6525 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6526 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006527
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006528 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6529 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6530 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6531 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006532
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006533It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6534expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6535be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6536the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6537
6538 The following rule :
6539
6540 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6541 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6542
6543 Can also be written that way :
6544
6545 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6546
6547It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6548to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6549simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6550sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6551good use is the following :
6552
6553 With named ACLs :
6554
6555 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6556 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6557 monitor fail if site_dead
6558
6559 With anonymous ACLs :
6560
6561 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6562
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006563See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006564
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006565
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010065667.8. Pattern extraction
6567-----------------------
6568
6569The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6570response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6571for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6572
6573All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6574"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6575begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6576arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6577much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6578equivalent used in ACLs.
6579
6580The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6581
6582 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6583 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6584
6585 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6586 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6587 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6588 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6589
6590 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6591 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6592 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6593 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6594 type integer and only works with such tables.
6595
Willy Tarreau4a568972010-05-12 08:08:50 +02006596 hdr(name) This extracts the last occurrence of header <name> in an HTTP
6597 request and converts it to an IP address. This IP address is
6598 then used to match the table. A typical use is with the
6599 x-forwarded-for header.
6600
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006601
6602The currently available list of transformations include :
6603
6604 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6605 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6606 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6607
6608 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6609 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6610 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6611
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006612 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6613 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6614 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6615 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6616 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6617
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006618
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066198. Logging
6620----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006621
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006622One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6623provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6624very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6625provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6626state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006627to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006628headers.
6629
6630In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6631about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6632send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6633
6634 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6635 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6636 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6637 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6638 at the termination.
6639
6640The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6641allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6642as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6643while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6644real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6645delay.
6646
6647
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066488.1. Log levels
6649---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006650
6651TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6652source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6653HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6654in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6655particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006656syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006657facilities.
6658
6659
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066608.2. Log formats
6661----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006662
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006663HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006664and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6665the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6666formats are the following ones :
6667
6668 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6669 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6670 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6671 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6672 extents.
6673
6674 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6675 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6676 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6677 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6678 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6679
6680 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6681 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6682 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6683 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6684 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6685
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006686 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6687 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6688 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6689 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6690
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006691Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6692specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6693field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6694servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6695always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6696identifier.
6697
6698Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6699 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6700 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6701 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6702 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6703
6704
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067058.2.1. Default log format
6706-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006707
6708This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6709as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6710format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6711
6712 Example :
6713 listen www
6714 mode http
6715 log global
6716 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6717
6718 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6719 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6720 (www/HTTP)
6721
6722 Field Format Extract from the example above
6723 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6724 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6725 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6726 4 'to' to
6727 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6728 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6729
6730Detailed fields description :
6731 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6732 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6733 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6734 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6735 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6736 and processed the connection.
6737 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6738
6739It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6740will eventually disappear.
6741
6742
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067438.2.2. TCP log format
6744---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006745
6746The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6747is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6748information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6749counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6750emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6751environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6752the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6753sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006754specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6755not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6756fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6757marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006758
6759 Example :
6760 frontend fnt
6761 mode tcp
6762 option tcplog
6763 log global
6764 default_backend bck
6765
6766 backend bck
6767 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6768
6769 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6770 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6771 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6772
6773 Field Format Extract from the example above
6774 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6775 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6776 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6777 4 frontend_name fnt
6778 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6779 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6780 7 bytes_read* 212
6781 8 termination_state --
6782 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6783 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6784
6785Detailed fields description :
6786 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6787 connection to haproxy.
6788
6789 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6790
6791 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6792 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6793 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6794 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6795
6796 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6797 and processed the connection.
6798
6799 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6800 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6801 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6802 applications.
6803
6804 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6805 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6806 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6807 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6808 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6809
6810 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6811 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6812 See "Timers" below for more details.
6813
6814 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6815 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6816 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6817 "Timers" below for more details.
6818
6819 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6820 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6821 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6822 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6823 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6824 details.
6825
6826 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6827 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6828 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6829 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6830 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6831
6832 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6833 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6834 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6835 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6836 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6837 for more details.
6838
6839 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6840 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6841 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6842 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6843 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006844 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006845
6846 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6847 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6848 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6849 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6850 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6851 caused by a denial of service attack.
6852
6853 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6854 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6855 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6856 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6857 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6858 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6859 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6860 denial of service attack.
6861
6862 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6863 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6864 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6865 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6866 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6867 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6868 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6869 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6870 be processed than on other servers.
6871
6872 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6873 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6874 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6875 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6876 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6877 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6878 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6879 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6880 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6881 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6882 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6883 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6884 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6885
6886 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6887 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6888 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6889 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6890 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6891 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6892 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6893 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6894
6895 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6896 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6897 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6898 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6899 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6900 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6901 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6902 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6903 occurs.
6904
6905
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069068.2.3. HTTP log format
6907----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006908
6909The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6910is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6911the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6912are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6913emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6914generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6915"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6916which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006917frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6918is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006919
6920Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6921slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6922with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6923
6924 Example :
6925 frontend http-in
6926 mode http
6927 option httplog
6928 log global
6929 default_backend bck
6930
6931 backend static
6932 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6933
6934 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6935 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6936 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006937 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006938
6939 Field Format Extract from the example above
6940 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6941 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6942 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6943 4 frontend_name http-in
6944 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6945 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6946 7 status_code 200
6947 8 bytes_read* 2750
6948 9 captured_request_cookie -
6949 10 captured_response_cookie -
6950 11 termination_state ----
6951 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6952 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6953 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6954 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6955 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006956
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006957
6958Detailed fields description :
6959 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6960 connection to haproxy.
6961
6962 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6963
6964 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6965 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6966 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6967 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6968 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6969
6970 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6971 and processed the connection.
6972
6973 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6974 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6975 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6976
6977 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6978 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6979 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6980 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6981 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6982 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6983
6984 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6985 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6986 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6987 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6988 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6989 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6990
6991 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6992 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6993 See "Timers" below for more details.
6994
6995 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6996 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6997 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6998 below for more details.
6999
7000 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
7001 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
7002 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
7003 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
7004 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
7005 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
7006 for more details.
7007
7008 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
7009 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
7010 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
7011 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
7012 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
7013 details.
7014
7015 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
7016 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
7017 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
7018
7019 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
7020 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
7021 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
7022 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
7023 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
7024 overflowing.
7025
7026 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
7027 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
7028 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
7029 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
7030 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
7031 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
7032 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
7033 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7034
7035 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
7036 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
7037 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
7038 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
7039 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
7040 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
7041 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
7042 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
7043
7044 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
7045 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
7046 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
7047 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
7048 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
7049 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
7050 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
7051
7052 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
7053 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
7054 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
7055 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
7056 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007057 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007058 system.
7059
7060 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
7061 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
7062 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
7063 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
7064 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
7065 caused by a denial of service attack.
7066
7067 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
7068 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
7069 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
7070 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
7071 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
7072 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
7073 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
7074 denial of service attack.
7075
7076 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
7077 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
7078 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
7079 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
7080 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
7081 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
7082 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
7083 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
7084 processed than on other servers.
7085
7086 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
7087 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
7088 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
7089 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
7090 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
7091 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
7092 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
7093 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
7094 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
7095 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
7096 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
7097 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
7098 should not be attributed to the logged server.
7099
7100 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7101 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
7102 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
7103 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
7104 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
7105 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
7106 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
7107 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
7108
7109 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
7110 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
7111 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
7112 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
7113 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
7114 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
7115 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
7116 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
7117 occurs.
7118
7119 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
7120 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
7121 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
7122 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
7123 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
7124 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
7125 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
7126 cookies" below for more details.
7127
7128 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
7129 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
7130 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
7131 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
7132 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
7133 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
7134 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
7135 and cookies" below for more details.
7136
7137 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
7138 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
7139 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
7140 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
7141 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
7142 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
7143 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
7144 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
7145
7146
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071478.3. Advanced logging options
7148-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007149
7150Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
7151just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
7152options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
7153for more information about their usage.
7154
7155
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071568.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
7157------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007158
7159It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
7160haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
7161commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
7162monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
7163ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
7164
7165 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
7166 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
7167 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
7168 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
7169
7170 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
7171 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
7172 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
7173 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
7174 such as other load-balancers.
7175
7176 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
7177 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
7178 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
7179
7180
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071818.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
7182----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007183
7184The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
7185what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
7186or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
7187"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
7188just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
7189log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
7190after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
7191is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
7192with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
7193with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
7194
7195
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071968.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
7197------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007198
7199Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
7200for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
7201"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
7202retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
7203raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
7204a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
7205file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
7206you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
7207"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
7208
7209
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072108.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
7211--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02007212
7213Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
7214multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
7215them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
7216"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
7217logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
7218error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
7219and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
7220too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
7221useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
7222alternative.
7223
7224
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020072258.4. Timing events
7226------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007227
7228Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7229reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7230the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7231frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7232mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7233
7234 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7235 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7236 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7237 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7238 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7239
7240 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7241 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7242 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7243 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7244 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7245
7246 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7247 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7248 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7249 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7250 connection never established.
7251
7252 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7253 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7254 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7255 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7256 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7257 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7258 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7259 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7260 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7261 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7262 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7263
7264 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7265 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7266 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7267 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7268 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7269
7270 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7271
7272 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7273 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7274 negative.
7275
7276These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7277protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7278that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007279due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007280close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7281session has been aborted on timeout.
7282
7283Most common cases :
7284
7285 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7286 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7287 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7288 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7289 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7290 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7291 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7292 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7293 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7294 connections have been accepted at once.
7295
7296 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7297 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7298 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7299 of ms on remote networks.
7300
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007301 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7302 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7303 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007304
7305 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7306 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7307 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7308 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7309 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7310 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7311 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7312 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7313 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7314 to the server until another one is released.
7315
7316Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7317
7318 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7319 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7320 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7321
7322 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7323 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7324 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7325
7326 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7327 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7328 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7329 flags.
7330
7331 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7332 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7333 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7334 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7335 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7336 the client connection was maintained open.
7337
7338 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7339 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7340 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7341 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7342
7343
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073448.5. Session state at disconnection
7345-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007346
7347TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7348"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
73492-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7350each of which has a special meaning :
7351
7352 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7353 session to terminate :
7354
7355 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7356
7357 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7358 server explicitly refused it.
7359
7360 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7361 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7362 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7363 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7364 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7365 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7366
7367 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7368 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7369 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7370 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7371 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7372
7373 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7374 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7375 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7376 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7377 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7378
7379 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7380 send or receive data.
7381
7382 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7383 send or receive data.
7384
7385 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7386 with nothing left in the buffers.
7387
7388 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7389
7390 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7391 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7392
7393 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7394 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7395 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7396 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7397 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7398
7399 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7400 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7401
7402 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7403 server (HTTP only).
7404
7405 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7406
7407 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7408 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7409 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7410
7411 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7412 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7413 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7414
7415 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7416
7417 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7418 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7419
7420 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7421 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7422 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7423
7424 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7425 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
Cyril Bontéa8e7bbc2010-04-25 22:29:29 +02007426 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, persistence conditionally
7427 ignored, or an attack.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007428
7429 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7430 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7431 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7432 another server.
7433
7434 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7435 server.
7436
7437 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7438
7439 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7440 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7441
7442 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7443
7444 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7445 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7446 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7447
7448 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7449
7450 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7451 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7452
7453 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7454
7455 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7456
7457The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7458happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7459helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7460starvation, attacks, etc...
7461
7462The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7463alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7464easier finding and understanding.
7465
7466 Flags Reason
7467
7468 -- Normal termination.
7469
7470 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7471 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7472 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7473 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7474
7475 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7476 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7477 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7478 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7479 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7480 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007481
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007482 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7483 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7484 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7485
7486 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7487 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7488 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7489
7490 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7491 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7492 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7493 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7494 the server takes too long to respond.
7495
7496 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7497 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7498 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7499 long a time to respond.
7500
7501 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7502 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7503 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7504 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7505 and the client.
7506
7507 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7508 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7509 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7510 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7511 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7512 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7513
7514 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7515 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007516 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7517 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7518 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7519 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007520
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007521 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007522 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7523 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7524 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7525 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7526 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7527
7528 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7529 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7530 503 or 504 here.
7531
7532 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7533 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7534 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7535 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7536 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7537
7538 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7539 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007540 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007541 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7542 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7543
7544 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7545 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7546 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7547 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7548 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7549 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7550 between haproxy and the server.
7551
7552 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7553 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7554 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7555 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7556 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7557 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7558 solution is to fix the application.
7559
7560 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7561 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7562 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7563 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7564 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7565 external attacks.
7566
7567 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7568 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7569 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7570 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7571 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7572
7573 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7574 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7575 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7576 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7577 containing unauthorized characters.
7578
7579 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7580 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7581 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7582 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7583
7584 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7585 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7586 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7587 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7588
7589 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7590 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7591 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7592 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7593
7594
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075958.6. Non-printable characters
7596-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007597
7598In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7599consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7600converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7601prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7602being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7603escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7604is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7605'}' when logging headers.
7606
7607Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7608issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7609containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7610
7611Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7612the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7613performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7614
7615
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076168.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7617---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007618
7619Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7620achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007621section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007622cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7623the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7624the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007625locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007626not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7627user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7628a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7629wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7630
7631 Examples :
7632 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7633 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7634
7635 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7636 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7637
7638
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076398.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7640---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007641
7642Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7643proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7644the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7645server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7646
7647Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7648response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007649section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007650
7651It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007652time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7653appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007654are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7655and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7656follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7657request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7658in the logs.
7659
7660 Example :
7661 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7662 listen proxy-out
7663 mode http
7664 option httplog
7665 option logasap
7666 log global
7667 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7668
7669 # log the name of the virtual server
7670 capture request header Host len 20
7671
7672 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7673 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7674
7675 # log the beginning of the referrer
7676 capture request header Referer len 20
7677
7678 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7679 capture response header Server len 20
7680
7681 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7682 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7683
7684 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7685 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7686
7687 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7688 capture response header Via len 20
7689
7690 # log the URL location during a redirection
7691 capture response header Location len 20
7692
7693 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7694 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7695 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7696 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7697 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7698
7699 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7700 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7701 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7702 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007703 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007704
7705 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7706 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7707 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7708 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7709 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007710 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007711
7712
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077138.9. Examples of logs
7714---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007715
7716These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7717them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7718reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7719
7720 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7721 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7722 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7723
7724 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7725 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7726
7727 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7728 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7729 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7730
7731 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7732 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7733
7734 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7735 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7736 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7737
7738 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007739 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007740 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7741 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7742
7743 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7744 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7745 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7746
7747 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7748 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7749 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7750 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7751 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7752 to return the 502 and not the server.
7753
7754 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007755 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007756
7757 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7758 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7759 Nothing was sent to any server.
7760
7761 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7762 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7763
7764 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7765 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7766 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7767 send a 408 return code to the client.
7768
7769 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7770 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7771
7772 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7773 5 seconds ("c----").
7774
7775 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7776 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007777 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007778
7779 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007780 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007781 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7782 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7783 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7784 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7785 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007786
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007787
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020077889. Statistics and monitoring
7789----------------------------
7790
7791It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7792mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7793CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7794Unix socket.
7795
7796
77979.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007798---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007799
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007800The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7801page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7802
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007803 0. pxname: proxy name
7804 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7805 for server)
7806 2. qcur: current queued requests
7807 3. qmax: max queued requests
7808 4. scur: current sessions
7809 5. smax: max sessions
7810 6. slim: sessions limit
7811 7. stot: total sessions
7812 8. bin: bytes in
7813 9. bout: bytes out
7814 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007815 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007816 12. ereq: request errors
7817 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007818 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007819 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7820 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007821 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007822 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7823 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7824 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7825 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7826 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7827 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7828 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7829 25. qlimit: queue limit
7830 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7831 27. iid: unique proxy id
7832 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7833 29. throttle: warm up status
7834 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7835 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007836 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007837 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7838 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7839 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007840 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007841 UNK -> unknown
7842 INI -> initializing
7843 SOCKERR -> socket error
7844 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7845 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7846 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7847 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7848 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7849 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7850 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7851 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7852 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7853 disable-on-404
7854 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7855 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7856 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007857 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7858 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007859 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7860 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7861 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7862 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7863 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7864 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007865 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7866 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7867 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7868 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007869 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7870 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007871
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007872
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020078739.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007874-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007875
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007876The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007877must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7878is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7879a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7880risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7881followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7882given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7883then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7884to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007885
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007886It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7887on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7888own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007889
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007890clear counters
7891 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7892 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7893 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7894 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7895 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7896
7897clear counters all
7898 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7899 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7900 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7901
7902disable server <backend>/<server>
7903 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7904 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7905 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7906 during the maintenance.
7907
7908 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7909 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7910
7911 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7912 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7913
7914 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7915 level "admin".
7916
7917enable server <backend>/<server>
7918 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7919 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7920
7921 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7922 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7923
7924 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7925 level "admin".
7926
7927get weight <backend>/<server>
7928 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7929 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7930 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7931 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7932 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7933 dash ('#').
7934
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007935help
7936 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7937 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007938
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007939prompt
7940 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7941 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7942 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7943 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7944 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7945 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7946 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7947 command.
7948
7949quit
7950 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007951
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007952set timeout cli <delay>
7953 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7954 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7955 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7956
7957set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7958 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7959 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7960 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7961 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7962 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7963 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7964 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7965 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7966 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7967 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7968 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7969 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7970 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7971 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7972
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007973show errors [<iid>]
7974 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7975 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007976 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7977 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7978 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007979
7980 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7981 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7982 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7983 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7984 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7985 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7986 are reported too.
7987
7988 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7989 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7990 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7991 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7992 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7993 code.
7994
7995 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7996 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7997 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7998 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7999 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
8000 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
8001 line.
8002
8003 Example :
8004 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
8005 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
8006 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
8007 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
8008
8009 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
8010 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
8011 00038 Location: blah\r\n
8012 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
8013 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
8014 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
8015 00204+ minal\r\n
8016 00211 \r\n
8017
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02008018 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01008019 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
8020 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
8021 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
8022 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
8023 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
8024 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01008025
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008026show info
8027 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
8028
8029show sess
8030 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02008031 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
8032 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
8033
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01008034show sess <id>
8035 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
8036 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
8037 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
8038 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
8039 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
8040 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008041
8042show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
8043 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
8044 possible to dump only selected items :
8045 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
8046 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
8047 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
8048 for example:
8049 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
8050 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
8051 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
8052
8053 Example :
8054 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
8055 Name: HAProxy
8056 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
8057 Release_date: 2009/09/23
8058 Nbproc: 1
8059 Process_num: 1
8060 (...)
8061
8062 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
8063 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
8064 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
8065 (...)
8066 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
8067
8068 $
8069
8070 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
8071 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
8072 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
8073 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01008074 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02008075
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02008076
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01008077/*
8078 * Local variables:
8079 * fill-column: 79
8080 * End:
8081 */